Chrysler 200 Convertible 2012 Owner`s manual

2012 200 Convertible
2012
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
12C27-126-AA
905626 Chry 200 conv OM cover.indd 1
First Edition
200 Convertible
Printed in U.S.A.
3/29/11 10:57 AM
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and
equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment
that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use
public transportation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped on the right front door sill
under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 20
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Convertible Top Operation Button — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25
▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 47
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 47
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 55
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 60
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place.
Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key slightly inward, rotate the
key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
Vehicle Key
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
• If you try to remove the key before you place the shift
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
lever into PARK, the key may become trapped temposwitches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
rarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
occurs, place the shift lever in PARK, rotate the key to
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posithe right slightly, then remove the key as described. If
tion. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in
The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to
the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Feaand stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
obtain service.
further information.
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either door will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
sounds a chime signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE:
• The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the
ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.
• With either front door open, and the key in the
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
During normal operation, after turning the ignition switch
to ON/RUN, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key
to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
the engine being shut off after two seconds.
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro- If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 secthe vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
engine.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Key威 from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
key is one which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
Customer Key Programming
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
Replacement Keys
valid Sentry Keys威 by performing the following procedure:
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
a Sentry Key威 has been programmed to a vehicle, it
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at least
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the
This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
first key.
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威 contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch. your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reproTurn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to your autho60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
General Information
To indicate that programming is complete, the indicator
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules part 15
light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
off.
subject to the following conditions:
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro• This device must accept any interference that may be
grammed during this procedure.
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk
for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid
release are disabled.
To Arm The System
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch
(one door must be open) or the LOCK button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm
open or closed), and close all doors.
will signal for about 18 minutes. For the first three minutes,
the horn will sound intermittently, the headlights will turn NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you
on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash and the lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers.
Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash. Then the
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
will flash for 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle
Rearming The System
Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE:
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
• During the 16-second arming period, if a door is
trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm
opened or the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN,
the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the
the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
• Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the
unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
passenger door trim panel, the trunk release button on vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
the instrument panel, and the HomeLink威/Garage Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
Door Opener (if equipped).
of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
To Disarm The System
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
or insert a valid Sentry Key威 into the ignition lock
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START position.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
NOTE:
becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
Security Alarm.
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Tamper Alert
If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have • The front courtesy overhead console and door courtimed out, the park and taillights flash three times, and
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the horn will chirp three times, when unlocking the
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
(extreme bottom position).
The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transREMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
mitter or open any door.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the the trunk, open the convertible top (if equipped), or
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to 66 ft (20 m)
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at
ther information.
the vehicle to activate the system.
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the NOTE:
ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF • The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects when using the RKE transmitter.
position..
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The Illuminated Entry
system (if equipped) will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
RKE Transmitter With Integrated Key
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
following procedure:
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are
inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
System. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNthan 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
LOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm
button while still holding the LOCK button.
System.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Flash Lights With Lock
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitwith the ignition in the LOCK position and the key ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
its previous setting.
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm actifollowing procedure:
vated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK
button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
while still holding the UNLOCK button.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Feawith the ignition in the LOCK position and the key tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitits previous setting.
ter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in
signal.
the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in
the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
following steps:
Convertible Top Operation Button — If Equipped
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans- Refer to “Convertible Top Operation” under “Undermitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still information.
holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
To Unlatch The Trunk
Programming Additional Transmitters
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
times to unlatch the trunk.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
Using The Panic Alarm
contact your authorized dealer for details.
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
Battery Replacement
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn NOTE:
will pulse on and off, and the Illuminated Entry system • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
(if equipped) will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when
using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due
to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises emitted by the
system.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade tool to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Battery Service
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob
distance, check for these two conditions:
may reduce this range.
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
of a battery is five years.
engine will remote start:
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile • Shift lever in PARK
or CB radios.
• Doors closed
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Hood closed
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Trunk closed
niently from outside the vehicle while still • Hazard switch off
maintaining security. The system has a range of
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
approximately 66 ft (20 m).
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• System not disabled from previous remote start event Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start premaWARNING!
turely:
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car- • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start • Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
System, windows, door locks or other controls
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
could cause serious injury or death.
to the RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
• Any engine warning lamps come on
• Low Fuel Light turns on
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
NOTE:
• For security, power window operation is disabled
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The brake pedal is pressed
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN Vehicle
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
third cycle.
• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one-time press of the remote start button
for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start
request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
inside door handle.
Manual Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger
door trim panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the
doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for
service.
Auto Unlock On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Auto Unlock Door On Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
abled.
following procedure:
2. The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/
RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the
LOCK position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
2
NOTE: This feature will not be functional until the
vehicle has been driven and the shift lever returned to the
PARK position.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Power Window Switches
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
WINDOWS
trim panel, which operates the passenger door window.
The window controls will operate when the ignition
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and
operate the door windows and the rear quarter windows. when the accessory delay feature is active.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If a fluttering noise is heard from the rear seat belts
while driving with the windows down, safely bring
the vehicle to a stop and buckle the rear seat belts over
the empty seats. This will keep tension on the seat
belts and remove the fluttering condition.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
to its full up position after closing the door. This action
allows the door to open without resistance and prevents
window and top seal damage.
Auto Window Down — If Equipped
The front window controls on the driver and passenger
door trim panels have an Auto-Down feature. These
switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch
either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
Smart Glass Feature
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
The door window will lower slightly if the window is
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
fully up when opening the door. The window will return
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch 1. Lowering all four windows to the full open position.
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will
2. Press and hold the Power Top Switch in the Close
cancel this feature.
direction. Once the Power Top becomes fully closed, all
For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window four windows will start closing.
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
3. Continue to hold the Power Top Switch an additional
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
two seconds after the windows are fully closed.
either door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle 4. Push all the window switches down firmly to open the
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- windows completely and continue to hold the switch
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In- down for an additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
strument Panel” for further information.
Reset Window Smart Glass Feature for
Opening/Closing the Door
If the vehicle battery goes dead, the window Smart Glass
Feature for opening and closing the door will be disabled.
To reactivate the window Smart Glass Feature, perform
the following steps after vehicle power is restored.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window control on the
passenger door. To disable the window control on the
passenger door, press and release the window LOCK
button (setting it in the down position). To enable the
window control, press and release the window LOCK
button again (setting it in the up position).
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with one
window down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
If the buffeting occurs with one window open, then open NOTE: This provides a locked area in the vehicle even
if the convertible top is open.
both windows together to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
To unlatch the trunk lid from inside the vehicle, press and
release the TRUNK RELEASE Button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle, press
and release the TRUNK RELEASE button on the RKE
transmitter two times.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
NOTE: The convertible top must be either closed and word “dECK” will display in the odometer indicating the
trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once
latched or open and latched to release the trunk.
the trunk is closed or if the trip button is pressed.
The trunk release button on the dash
will be disabled if the vehicle is locked With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the
by pressing the power door lock key out, the word “dECK” will display until the trunk is
switch or by pressing the LOCK but- closed.
ton on the Remote Keyless Entry On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor(RKE) transmitter. The trunk release mation Center (EVIC), the words “Trunk Ajar” will
button will be enabled when the ve- display.
Trunk Release
hicle is unlocked by the RKE or if the
Button
key is inserted into the ignition and
turned to ON/RUN or START.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
restraint) — if equipped
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
possible.
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
wheel
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
CHildren (LATCH).
energy during an impact event
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
collision.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
WARNING!
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger You should read the instructions provided with your
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
tion.
shoulder belts properly.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- Front Air Bags room to inflate.
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) need room to
inflate. Do not lean against the door or window.
Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even normal conditions. However, in an accident, the belt will
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen vehicle or being thrown out.
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or accidents. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
WARNING!
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident the
best.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in an accident much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2. The seat belt latch plate is on the outboard side of the
front seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as
far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
lift up on the shoulder belt and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
accident.
Positioning The Lap Belt
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in an accident. The belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but
across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
additional information, refer to “Installing Child ReLap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
shoulder belt.
feature for each seating position.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
Driver
Center
Passenger
anchor point.
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
Second Row
ALR
N/A
ALR
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a fold that
• N/A — Not Applicable
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
latch plate.
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
folded webbing.
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
the entire belt is extracted.
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre- 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail- now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combinaHow To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
12 years old and under should always be properly
locking mode.
restrained in the rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an
accident. These devices may improve the performance of
the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
worn snugly and positioned properly.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Reimpact requires deployment, both the driver and front
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretenpassenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) — If
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
Equipped
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
These head restraints are passive, deployable compoextent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
certain types of rear impacts.
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
AHR In Reset Position
NOTE:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
into the back decorative plastic half.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deacAfter the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
tivating BeltAlert威.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
belt alert) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is an accident.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
extender. This extender should be used only if the
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
remove the extender, and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on the severity and type of
collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- • Knee Impact Bolster
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats. • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
and Seat Track Position Sensors
authorized dealer immediately.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
Air Bag System Components
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
system components:
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
• Air Bag Warning Light
sensors.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce subOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colliThe ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
required for this vehicle.
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic severe initial deceleration.
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SupplemenThe side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
tal Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), and front seat belt
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
pretensioners, as required, depending on the severity and
type of collision.
type of impact.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addiover time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
have deployed.
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all accirollover collisions.
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
Inflator Units
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
comes on again after initial startup.
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Front And Side Impact Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
in determining appropriate response to impact events.
immediately after deployment.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
•
•
•
•
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
Cut off fuel to the engine.
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
until the ignition key is turned off.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
removed.
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
Unlock the doors automatically.
immediately.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems pereight-second interval.
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
remains on while driving.
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
These data can help provide a better understanding of
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perChildren 12 years or younger should ride properly
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enstatistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
WARNING!
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anthe front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
chors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
infants in this position.
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward- the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc- in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint:
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to • All passenger seating positions contain automatic
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
locking retractors. However, any seat belt system will
against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and
in a rear seat.
pull it tight if necessary.
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it • Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
WARNING!
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
weight and height limits.
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides
for the installation of the child restraint without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. The two rear seating positions have
lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating
LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible, webbingmounted lower attachments or fixed lower attachments.
Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, never
install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats
share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belts. If your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instructions, refer to “Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System”.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage, have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
tether anchors are underneath access covers in the carpet
covering the back of the seat where you see this symbol.
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
meets the seatback, and are just visible when means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
surfaces.
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages of the seat cover material. Then, rotate the tether anchorbehind each rear seating position. Access ports age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing
to the tether anchors are located in the panel the child restraint, push the tether strap and hook
between the rear seat and the rear window. The through the access port and down into the trunk. Open
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
the access cover on the carpet covering the back of the Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
seat and attach the tether strap hook to the anchor. Be not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct your child unattended in the vehicle.
path between the anchor and the child restraint. Finally,
WARNING!
tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
instructions.
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts when installing an infant or child restraint.
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the Belts
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
“Automatic Locking Mode”. The chart below defines the
seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate.
First Row
Second Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
Center
N/A
N/A
Passenger
ALR
ALR
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
the buckle with the release button facing out.
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
2
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. If lowered, raise the convertible top.
NOTE: The convertible top must be in the UP position
to access the tether anchor.
Child Tether Access Port Cover
2. Open the access port cover (A) behind the seat where
3. Push the tether strap and hook (B) through the access
you are placing the child restraint.
port and down into the trunk.
NOTE: Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path from the child seat to the anchor.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Open the access cover (C) on the carpet covering the
back of the seat and attach the tether strap hook (D) to the
anchor.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
an accident.
Child Tether Anchor
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriSAFETY TIPS
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a Transporting Passengers
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate AREA.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the or retractor condition, replace the belt.
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
Air Bag Warning Light
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the comThe light should come on and remain on for four to eight
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Convertible Top Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
▫ Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions . . . . 90
▫ Cargo Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
▫ Power Convertible Top Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Lowering The Power Convertible Top . . . . . . . 96
▫ Raising The Power Convertible Top . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Wind Stop — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
▫ Power Convertible Top Operation And
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Emergency Bypass Mode
(To Raise The Top Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 108
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Recliner Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Easy Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Adjusting Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 159
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . 159
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 162 䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 169
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 172
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Front Seat Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 177
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Glove Box Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . 186
䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Ski Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips.
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry
the surface before opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicles interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicles interior.
WARNING!
The convertible top does not provide the structural
protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection
of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts at all
times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are
ejected from the vehicle during a collision.
You can lower or raise the power convertible top from
inside the vehicle or lower the top remotely using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Either operation
takes approximately 30 seconds. The entire process, including unlatching or latching the top at the windshield
header is automatic.
The top does take up some space in the trunk when
retracted. However, the trunk will still hold a significant
amount of cargo.
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When operating the power convertible top, the trunk lid Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions
will pivot at the rear of the vehicle, swing open by the
NOTE:
rear window, and then pivot backward. This allows room
• The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle
for the top to retract into or unfold from its stowage area
is stationary, the cargo shield is positioned correctly,
in the trunk.
and the trunk lid is closed and latched. In addition, the
When lowering the top, the system extends the hard
system prohibits lowering the top when ambient temtonneau cover, which stows conveniently underneath the
perature is at 0°F (-18°C) or lower, However, the
trunk lid. The tonneau cover closes the area between the
system allows you to raise the top at ambient temperarear seats and the trunk lid to conceal the top when stowed.
tures as low as -40°F (-40°C).
When raising the top, the system retracts the hard • Do not attempt to lower the top when frost, ice, or
tonneau cover back into its stowage area underneath the
snow may be present, this could cause damage or
trunk lid.
prevent the top from stowing completely.
To complete either operation, the trunk lid returns to its • The Power Top Control Module (PTCM) monitors and
controls lowering and raising of the top. A series of
normal position and then latches.
micro-switches verify that operations are complete
Spring-loaded flipper doors, which provide clearance for
before allowing the next stage of lowering or raising
the linkage, close off notches in the quarter trim panels
operation.
when the top is down.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
• Opening and closing the top consecutively without the
engine running may run the battery down.
• If a fluttering noise is heard from the rear seat belts
while driving with the top down, safely bring the
vehicle to a stop and buckle the rear seat belts over the
empty seats. This will keep tension on the seat belts
and remove the fluttering condition.
CAUTION!
• Correctly position the cargo shield in the trunk
before stowing the top. Doing so closes a switch
that allows top operation (stowing) to proceed. If
the switch is not closed, a warning message displays in the instrument cluster to notify the driver.
• Always place items carefully into the trunk.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not push items too far into the trunk, particularly when the top is retracted into its stowage area
in the trunk.
• Do not use the area on top of the tonneau cover for
storage.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the convertible top components, trunk contents,
cargo shield, and the vehicle interior.
CAUTION!
Before operating the power top:
• Always check on top of the tonneau cover area to
be sure that it is clear of debris or other items.
• Make sure the ambient temperature is above 0°F
(-18°C).
(Continued)
3
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never attempt to lower a frozen convertible top.
Wait until the top is thawed before lowering it into
the stowage compartment. Lowering a cloth top at
temperatures below 32°F (0°C) should be avoided.
• Make sure the convertible top is dry before lowering it into the stowage compartment. Lowering
the top when damp, wet, or dirty can cause stains,
mildew, and damage to the inside of your vehicle.
• Make sure there is sufficient clearance of at least
7.5 ft. (2.2 m) for the top to move up.
• To prevent striking a low ceiling or automatic door
opener with the top, it is strongly recommended
that you do not operate the power top inside a
garage or parking structure.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the convertible top components, trunk contents,
and the vehicle interior.
• Do not operate the power top with the hydraulic
pump valve open.
• Do not allow the top to remain in the suspended
position. After approximately 10 minutes in the
suspended position, the hydraulic pressure will
release, which will allow the top and the trunk lid
to lower. Pressing the power top switch will cancel
this operation.
• Always use a normal ice scraper to remove snow or
ice from the rear window. Use of a sharp object or
other tools could scratch the panels (hard top) or
tear the fabric (soft top) when removing snow or
ice.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always close the top when leaving your vehicle so
as not to leave the interior exposed to potentially
damaging outdoor conditions.
• Do not leave the top lowered for several weeks at
a time. Close it occasionally to prevent discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow the
creases to smooth out. This is especially important
if the top was stowed when not completely dry.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the convertible top components, trunk contents,
and the vehicle interior:
WARNING!
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you:
• Before operating the power top, make sure that no
moving parts of the convertible top can injure a
person or animal.
• Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near
the convertible top components, the upper windshield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or
the convertible top stowage area while raising or
lowering the convertible top.
• When using the power top button on RKE transmitter, if potential danger exists while lowering
the top, release the button immediately to interrupt the operation.
(Continued)
3
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• When using the power top switch on the instrument panel, if potential danger exists while lowering the top, release the switch immediately to
interrupt the operation.
• When using the power top switch on the instrument panel, if potential danger exists while raising
the top, release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation.
• Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top
completely closed and latched or fully lowered
into its stowage compartment.
• Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is
in motion.
Cargo Shield
The cargo shield is located in the trunk. Before lowering
the convertible top, you must unfold the cargo shield and
seat the tabs at each end of the cargo shield in the V slots
in the trunk liner. Doing so closes a switch that allows top
operation. If the switch is not closed, a warning message
displays in the instrument cluster to notify the driver.
Positioning The Cargo Shield For Top Operation
Pull the cargo shield toward you to begin unfolding the
panels. Grasp the handle in the center of the outermost
(top) panel and raise the cargo shield. Then, align and
seat the tabs at each end of the cargo shield in the V slots
in the trunk liner as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION!
Do NOT place items on top of the cargo shield. Items
placed on cargo protector will interfere with the top
during operation and cause excessive damage to the
top and cargo shield.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
forward onto the horizontal panel, then grasp both
panels and lift them to the forward, upright position in
the trunk.
3
Cargo Shield
Positioning The Cargo Shield For Cargo Storage
To maximize the storage space in the trunk, the cargo
shield can be stowed in the forward portion of the trunk.
Stowed Cargo Shield
To stow the cargo shield, grasp the handle of the upright NOTE: The convertible top will NOT operate with the
panel of the cargo shield, lifting the pins out of the V slots cargo shield in the stowed position.
in the trunk trim. Continue folding the upright panel
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Convertible Top Controls
Lowering the Power Convertible Top
The power top switch is located on the front of the center
Using The Power Top Switch
console.
NOTE: The power top switch will operate when the
There is also a power top button on the Remote Keyless
ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and
Entry (RKE) transmitter for remotely lowering the power
when in the power accessory delay.
convertible top.
There are two Top Down switch positions.
Press and hold the switch to the first detent.
The system will lower all fully raised windows
approximately 0.5 in (10 mm), lower the top to
its fully retracted position, and then raise the windows.
Press and hold the switch to the second detent. The
system will lower all four windows and the top to their
fully retracted positions.
Power Top Button
The driver has to press and hold the convertible top
switch during the entire opening cycle, if there is an
obstruction and the driver is alerted, the convertible top
operation can be stopped by releasing the switch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Using The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
Raising The Power Convertible Top
NOTE: Steps 1 – 3 must be performed within five Using The Power Top Switch
seconds.
NOTE: The power top switch will operate when the
1. Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and
when in the power accessory delay.
transmitter.
Press and hold the switch in the Top Up
position until the operation of raising the top
and latching it is complete, which is indicated
by the system raising the windows and dis3. Press and hold the POWER TOP button until the playing “TOP DONE” in the odometer or “CONVERTPower Top and All Windows Down feature is complete. IBLE TOP COMPLETE” in the EVIC (if equipped).
2. Press and release the POWER TOP button
on the RKE transmitter.
Using The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
You cannot use the power top button on the RKE
transmitter to raise the power convertible top. You must
use the power top switch inside the vehicle to perform
this operation.
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manually
Closing the power convertible top manually is a complicated and physically demanding procedure, and it requires a special tool to do so. In the event that you
experience a malfunction when operating the power
convertible top:
Wind Stop — If Equipped
The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle.
The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operation. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up.
However, when not in use, the Wind Stop folds to allow
for convenient storage underneath the cargo shield in the
trunk.
1. Read all of the Notes, Cautions, and Warning found
under “Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions” to NOTE: It is recommended that you lower the convertverify all operating conditions are met.
ible top before installing or removing the Wind Stop.
2. Check for Operation and Warning Messages as de- Installing The Wind Stop
scribed under “Power Convertible Top Operation and
1. Remove the Wind Stop from the trunk.
Warning Messages.” If applicable, perform the related
2. Unfold the Wind Stop framework.
action to correct the condition present.
3. If Steps 1 and 2 do not resolve the problem, refer to 3. Lay the small frame (1) flat on top of the large frame
(2) and snap the two frames together by engaging the
“Emergency Bypass Mode”.
frame lock (3).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
NOTE: The frames must lie flat on each other in order to 4. Pivot the small frame (1) away from the large frame (2)
snap them together.
until the pivot lock (3) engages to lock the two frames in
an L shape.
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Unfold both stems at the rear of the large frame.
6. Align and insert the stems into the slot in each trim
panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
7. Align the pins at the front of the large frame with the Disengage the pivot lock (1) to fold the small frame flat
hole in each trim panel. Slide the pins outward until fully onto the large frame. Disengage the frame lock (2) to
disconnect the small frame from the large frame.
extended into each hole.
3
Removing And Storing The Wind Stop
Reverse the installation procedure to remove, fold, and
store the Wind Stop. However, note the following before
doing so:
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
(EVIC) – if equipped, or in the Odometer for vehicles not
Power Convertible Top Operation And Warning
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to the following chart for
Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the PTCM dis- message related information:
plays various power convertible top operation and warning messages in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
EVIC Message〫
EVIC Message Display
Time〫
CONVERTIBLE TOP
NOT SECURED
CONVERTIBLE TOP
COMPLETE
Until Operation is
Complete
9 sec.
Odometer
Message (<
5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
TOP nOT
SECUrE
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Until Operation is
Complete
TOP DONE Display
Scrolls for
6 sec.
Odometer
Message (>
5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
—
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Chime
Condition
Operator
Action Required
—
—
—
—
Single
Chime
The System —
is Lowering or Raising the Top
The System —
Completes
Operation
of Lowering or Raising the Top
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
EVIC Message〫
EVIC Message Display
Time〫
SECURE
CARGO
SHIELD
9 sec.
CONVERTIBLE TOP
NOT SECURED
Until Operation is
Complete
Odometer
Message (<
5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
SET
CARGO
SHIELD
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
TOP nOT
SECUrE
Until Operation is
Complete
Display
Scrolls for
9 sec.
Odometer
Message (>
5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
—
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Chime
Condition
Operator
Action Required
—
Single
Chime
TOP nOT
SECUrE
Until Operation is
Complete
Single
Chime
The Top
Fails to
Move
When Operating the
Power Top
Control
The System
Fails to
Complete
Operation
of Lowering or Raising the Top
Position
the Cargo
Shield in
the Trunk
to Allow
Top Operation
Cycle
Power Top
Control
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
EVIC Message〫
EVIC Message Display
Time〫
SPEED TOO 9 sec.
HIGH
TRUNK
AJAR
Odometer
Message (<
5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
SPEED
TOO HIGH
Continuous DECK
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Display
Scrolls for
9 sec.
Odometer
Message (>
5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
TOP
Continuous DECK
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Chime
Condition
Operator
Action Required
6 sec.
Single
Chime
You Are
Operating
the Power
Top at a
Vehicle
Speed
Greater
Than
0 mph
(0 km/h)
The Trunk
Lid is Unlatched or
Open
The Top
Will Not
Operate
Unless the
Vehicle is
Stationary.
Continuous Single
Chime
The Top
Will Not
Operate
Unless the
Trunk Lid
is Closed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
EVIC Message〫
EVIC Message Display
Time〫
CONVERT- 6 sec.
IBLE TOP
MALFUNCTION
CONVERTIBLE TOP
MALFUNCTION
Odometer
Message (<
5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
TOP FAIL
Until Fault TOP FAIL
is No Longer Detected or
Repaired
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Display
Scrolls for
6 Seconds
Odometer
Message (>
5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
TOP
Display
TOP
Scrolls until Fault is
No Longer
Detected or
Repaired
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Chime
Condition
Operator
Action Required
6 sec.
Single
Chime
The PTCM
Activated
the System
LOCKOUT
Feature
The PTCM
Activated
the System
LOCKOUT
Feature
Refer to
Foot Note
〫〫〫
Display
Single
Flashes un- Chime
til Fault is
No Longer
Detected or
Repaired
See your
authorized
dealer for
service
〫 If so equipped.
〫〫 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC.
〫〫〫 The PTCM will lockout the power convertible top system if the vehicle charging system is malfunctioning, or
the battery is run down, or the hydraulic pump is overheating. In addition, the system prohibits lowering the top when
ambient temperature is at 0°F (-18°C) or lower and raising the top when ambient temperature is below -40°F (-40°C).
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If you are trying to lower the top and ambient temperature is 0°F (-18°C) or lower, wait until the temperature
rises and the top is thawed and dry before operating the power top. A soft top should not be lowered at temperatures below 32°F (0°C).
• If you are trying to raise the top and ambient temperature is below -40°F (-40°C), wait until the temperature
rises before operating the power top.
• If the vehicle charging system is malfunctioning, see your authorized dealer for service.
• If the battery is run down, have it recharged and tested at your authorized dealer.
• Hydraulic pump overheating can occur if you lower and raise the top consecutively (usually more than six or
seven times depending upon the ambient temperature). Wait at least five minutes before operating the power
top again. NOTE: If lockout occurs due to hydraulic pump overheating, the system will allow you to raise the
top without waiting five minutes. However, do so only if necessary.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Emergency Bypass Mode (To Raise The Top
Only)
This procedure is only to be used to raise the top when
the top cannot be returned to the UP (raised) position by
pressing the POWER TOP switch or is in a position in
which the vehicle cannot be driven. Please follow these
emergency bypass instructions to return the top to the UP
(raised) position.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Using the Emergency Bypass Mode could potentially damage the convertible top and should only
be used to raise the power top to the UP (raised)
position when the normal top operation is not
functioning.
If damage starts to occur while in the Emergency Bypass
Press the POWER TOP switch in the Top Up direction Mode, immediately release the power top switch and see
five times within two seconds and hold the switch in the your authorized dealer.
Top Up position for a minimum of two minutes.
NOTE: This procedure may take more time to fully raise
and close the power top. It is not uncommon to see
CAUTION!
delays of up to 30 seconds before operation begins.
• Once this procedure has been completed and the
top is in the UP (raised) position, see your authorized dealer. DO NOT exceed 40 mph (64 km/h).
(Continued)
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
Auto Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim. A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or
off position.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
3
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirror Switch
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
direction you want the mirror to move. When finished,
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
return the knob to the center “O” (Off) position to guard
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Mirror Directions
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
A vanity mirror is attached to the inside face of the sun
visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward
and flip the mirror cover upward.
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
Vanity Mirror
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect™ Phone Button
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
button and Voice Com(Uconnect™ Phone
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or andetails.
other prompt.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi• For certain operations, compound commands can be
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
switch), if so equipped.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios.
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
• Press the
button to begin.
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button on the radio control head.
“Device Pairing”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
Dial By Saying A Number
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
button to begin.
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile • Press the
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial”.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
priority level between one and seven, with one being
want to call.
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any • For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number • The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
of certain radios.
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
• Press the
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Press the
“Call”.
button to begin.
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
person you want to call.
“Phonebook New Entry”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomyou can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previmended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
instead of “Bob”.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
phonebook entry that you are adding.
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- website for supported phones.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
• To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
main menu.
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
start the vehicle.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati- • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
NOTE:
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availwhen the vehicle is not in motion.
able for use.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
deleted or edited.
phone is accessible.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
book.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
entry that you wish to edit.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
phone connection.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
to the main menu.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
button while the
from the list, press the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
“Delete”.
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
Entry” feature.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
• Press the
button to begin.
language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete”.
deleted or edited.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
• Press the
• Press the
button to begin.
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
“Phonebook List Names”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you • The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
deleted.
button during the playing of the desired name, and
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
say “Call”.
is deleted.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
operations at this point.
deleted or edited.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
button until you hear a single
call, press and hold the
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling Conference Call
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
to “Conference Call” in this section.
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
joined into one conference call.
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Toggling Between Calls
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep,
press the
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
one conference call.
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
Call Termination
time.
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
Redial
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
button to begin.
• Press the
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura“Redial”.
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Uconnect™ Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
• Press the
button to begin.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
the name of the language you wish to switch to operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete •
the language selection.
•
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
Press the
button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not language- NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
specific and is usable across all languages.
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Emergency Assistance
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
reachable:
area.
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
• If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button and say
some systems. To do this, press the
“Towing Assistance”.
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your • The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528for the mobile phone directly.
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
WARNING!
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emerthe Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
gency, your mobile phone must be:
Towing Assistance references.
• turned on,
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
• paired to the Uconnect™ System,
button and say
some systems. To do this, press the
• and have network coverage.
“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
• Press the
button to begin.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
Voice Mail Calling
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying
press the
with Automated Systems”.
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
Working With Automated Systems
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
This method is used in instances where one generally has customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while number on a pager.
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send.” The
service or automated customer service line. Some ser- call and then press the
vices require immediate response selection. In some system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
instances, that may be too quick for use of the say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
Uconnect™ Phone.
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
tones over the phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE:
• Press the
button to begin.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
network configurations. This is normal.
one of the following:
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By • Following the beep, say “Mute”.
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
button.
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same • Press the
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
Advanced Phone Connectivity
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transthat the call did not go through even though the call is in ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
audio.
button
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
and say “Transfer Call”.
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
button and
phone being announced, press the
with one electronic device at a time.
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
paired phone.
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de- Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• Press the
button to begin.
button to begin.
• Press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
• You can also press the
button at any time while the
• When prompted, say “List Phones”.
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
training mode, follow one of the two following proce• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the dures:
prompts.
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
• You can also press the
button at any time while the radio mode):
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
wish to delete.
the session begins, or,
• Press the
button to begin.
• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training,
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to Voice Command
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
best results, the Voice Training session should be comconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
switched off.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
you.
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
• press the
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- • Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
cents, the system may not always work for some.
number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance
not in motion is recommended.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
• low-to-medium blower setting,
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo• low road noise,
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• smooth road surface,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness If you receive a new text message while your phone is
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
• Press the
button.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
compromised with the convertible top down.
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Recent Calls
• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Downyou.
load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, IncomAfter reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
ing and Missed Calls.
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Where are you?
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
4. I need more direction.
a new message:
5. L O L
• Press the
button.
6. Why
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
7. I love you
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say 8. Call me
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
9. Call me later
button while the
To send a message, press the
10. Thanks
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
11. See You in 15 minutes
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to. 12. I am on my way
List of Preset Messages:
13. I’ll be late
1. Yes
14. Are you there yet?
2. No
15. Where are we meeting?
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
• Press the
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to command.
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
seconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.
options.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
button, listen set to low.
options, press the Voice Command
for the beep, and say your command.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
button while the commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Comwill be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
change commands. This will become helpful once you
Commands
start to learn the options.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
commands. Universal commands are available at all
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
times. Local commands are available if the supported
These commands are universal and can be used from any radio mode is active.
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Changing the Volume
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
• “Setup” (to switch to system setup)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
menu.
Radio FM
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
mands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
Memo
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of following:
the following commands:
• “Change to setup”
− “Save” (to save the memo)
• “Switch to system setup”
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Change to setup”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Main menu setup” or
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the Voice • “Switch to setup”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
• “Language English”
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Language French”
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
• “Language Spanish”
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Tutorial”
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Voice Training”
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice SEATS
button first and wait for the beep before Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Command
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
vehicle.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Power Seats
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up, down,
forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switch
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under any seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the center instrument panel area.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
If HIGH-level heating is selected, the system automatically switches to LOW-level heating and turns one indicator light OFF after a maximum of 60 minutes of
continuous operation. It will turn the heater and the
remaining indicator light OFF after a maximum of
45 minutes of continuous operation. If LOW-level heating
is selected, the system automatically turns the heater and
the indicator light OFF after a maximum of 45 minutes of
continuous operation.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recliner Adjustment
The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seat, lean forward slightly and lift the lever.
Then lean back to the position desired and release the
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
Seatback Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The control lever is on the
inboard side of the seat. Turn the control lever downward
to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount
of lumbar support.
Lumbar Support
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pull the lever upward to move the seat and seatback
Easy Entry System
The Easy Entry lever is located on upper seat belt anchor forward.
cover.
When returning the seat to its normal position, the
memory feature restores the seat position and seatback
recline position to their current settings.
On the driver seat, pull the lever upward to move the
seatback forward.
When returning the seatback to its normal position the
memory feature restores the seatback recline position to
its current setting.
Easy Entry Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Adjusting Active Head Restraints
Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a rear impact. The Active Head Restraint
should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is
located above the top of your ear.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint (on some models, you may need to press the
push button). To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
3
Adjusted Head Restraint
Push Button
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury
or death in the event of a collision. The head
restraints should always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Always adjust the head
restraints when the vehicle is in PARK.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and lift the secondary latch underneath the center front edge of the hood
and raise the hood.
Hood Safety Catch
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the underside of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
3
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Prop Rod Hole Location
Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the prop rod
in its proper location.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever on the left side of the steering
column controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, turn signal lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights
(if equipped).
Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn the end of the lever to
the second detent for headlight operation.
Headlight Switch
Multifunction Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned to the LOCK position, a chime will sound to
alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Headlights With Wipers (Available With Automatic
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
position. When the system is on, the Headlight Time off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Inforstay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition mation Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Feaswitch to the LOCK position. To turn the Automatic tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
System off, turn the end of the multifunction lever out of further information.
the AUTO position.
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- This feature is particularly useful when exiting your
vehicle in an unlit area. It provides the safety of headlight
lights will turn on in the Automatic mode.
illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the delay, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position while the headlights are still on. Then,
turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay
interval begins when you turn off the headlights. Only
the headlights will illuminate during this time.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
If you turn the headlights, parking lights, or ignition Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parkswitch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
ing lights or headlights are on.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
turn off in the normal manner.
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
the parking lights or headlights are on.
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under- detent to turn on the interior lighting.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
Dimmer Control
Front Fog Light Control
Fog Lights — If Equipped
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on will turn off the front fog lights.
the end of the multifunction lever.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The front turn signal lamps will turn on as Daytime
Running Lights (DRL) whenever the ignition is ON, the
engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking
brake is released and the shift lever is in any position
except PARK.
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will flash when a
turn signal is in operation and return to DRL mode when
the turn signal is not operating.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
Turn Signal Control
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
control in the multifunction lever. These lights are also
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry Systhe headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever tem.
toward you, to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the FlashTo-Pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high
beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds before
activating the Flash-To-Pass function again.
Interior Lights
Courtesy/Reading Light Switches
Two courtesy/reading lights are located in the bottom of
the rearview mirror. You can turn these lights on and off A courtesy light is also found in the rear of the center
from the switches in the mirror or from the dimmer console. You can turn this light on and off from the
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
dimmer control in the multifunction lever. This light is
also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry
System.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for
low-speed wiper operation, or to the HI position for
high-speed wiper operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Changing Wiper Speeds
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
“Park” position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position
again.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle
every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push downward on the windshield wiper/washer control lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the
windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle.
The wipers will continue to operate until you release the
lever.
Changing Intermittent Settings
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
delay times will be doubled.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if
they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Mist Control
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
Headlights With Wipers (Available With Auto
Headlights Only)
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
the intermittent interval previously selected.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe
cycles and then turn off.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
column in position, pull the lever upward until fully right side of the steering wheel.
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 4 — CANCEL
3 — SET accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec(40 km/h).
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET
button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed will be established.
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
To Accelerate For Passing
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
increase until the button is released, then the new set
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
speed will be established.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
vehicle set speed.
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
moderate hills is normal.
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differControl.
ent HomeLink威 channels. The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secuprogramming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
rity Alarm is active.
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
before you begin programming.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威 NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
ter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the fre- activates, programming is complete.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
On some garage door openers/devices there may be a To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is follow these steps:
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indithe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the frerelease the button.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programboth buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
to rapid.
steps.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
and observe the indicator light.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programbefore 1995.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
pressed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
follow these steps:
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
door or gate motor.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
release the button.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain- away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
ing steps.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigtrained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door follow these steps:
may open and close while you are programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
and observe the indicator light.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
pressed.
follow all remaining steps.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
Using HomeLink姞
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
To operate, press and release the programmed
NOT erase the channels.
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lightprogramming, plug it back in at this time.
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Security
Troubleshooting Tips
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
in your vehicle.
are some of the most common solutions:
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
erased.
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by
a fuse.
The instrument panel power outlet, located below the
climate control knobs, has power available only when the
ignition is ON. This power outlet will also operate a
conventional cigar lighter unit.
3
Instrument Panel Power Outlet
NOTE: To preserve the heating element, do not hold the
lighter in the heating position.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A second power outlet is located inside the center con- NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob
sole.
and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Center Console
The center console power outlet is powered directly from
the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged
into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #16 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
2 — #11 Fuse 15 A Blue Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
An optional ash receiver is available from your authorized dealer and will fit in the center console front
cupholder.
The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter
that can be used with the power outlets. Refer to “Power
Outlets” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholder
The cupholder in the center console will accommodate
either two large size cups or two 20 oz. (.5 L) bottles or
cans. The one-piece insert can be removed easily for
cleaning. An optional removable ashtray may be located
in one of the cupholders.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
3
Front Cupholders
Rear Seat Cupholders
Cupholders for the rear seat occupants are located in the
armrests. Each cupholder is capable of holding up to a
20 oz. (.5 L) bottle or can.
Rear Seat Cupholder
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are place in the cupholder,
they can spill when the door is closed, burning the
occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid
injury.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
CONSOLE FEATURES
Glove Box Storage Compartment
The glove box storage compartment is located on the
right side of the instrument panel. To open the glove box,
pull outward on the latch handle located on the front of
the glove box.
Storage
The center console is located between the front driver
and passenger seats. The center console armrest slides
forward from design position to provide added user
comfort. The center console can be used for storage and
is also equipped with an electrical power outlet. Refer to
“Power Outlets” in “Understanding The Feature of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Glove Box Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3
Center Console
Center Console Storage
Two separate storage compartments are also located The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen
underneath the armrest.
and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will
hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet. The console’s front opening
lid allows for easy access to these compartments.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• A notch in the front of the console base allows for use
of a cellular phone while it is plugged into the power
outlet with the armrest latched down.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
• The power outlet can also energize the cigar lighter in
nearly flat extension of the load floor.
the optional cup holder ash receiver.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
WARNING!
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier
objects as low and as far forward as possible. Place as
(Continued) much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much
weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the
rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
Ski Pass-Through
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
door.
Ski Pass-Through
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ EVIC Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
䡵 Instrument Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
䡵 Mini-Trip Computer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Tire PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Oil Change Required — If Equipped . . . . . . 218
▫ EVIC Units Selection (Units In Display) . . . . 223
▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
4
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N
(RHR/RER/RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV
—
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
䡵 Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 227
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 236
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 238
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For
MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For
MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 247
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 255
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 256
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 278
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 266
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 267
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 272
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
. . . . . . . 281
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . 281
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Side Window Demister Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Ignition Switch
— Analog Clock
6 — Radio
7 — Passenger Airbag
8 — Glove Compartment
9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped
10 — Hazard Switch
11 — Storage Compartment
12 — Climate Control
13 — Trunk Release Button
14 — Power Outlet
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
1. Temperature Gauge
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaas a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
ture. Any reading below the red mark of the gauge shows
from the engine cooling system.
that the engine cooling system is operating properly. The
gauge pointer may show a higher than normal tempera- 2. Fuel Door Reminder
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in
located on the left side of the vehicle.
heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
3. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
4. Speedometer
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
kilometers per hour (km/h).
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
5. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level drops to approximately 2.0 gal- Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
lons (7.6 Liters), the fuel symbol will light and a
7. Air Bag Warning Light
single chime will sound.
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
NOTE: This light will remain on until a minimum of
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
approximately 3.0 gallons (11.3 Liters) of fuel is added.
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
6. Charging System Light
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
This light shows the status of the electrical chargdealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
ing system. The light should come on briefly when
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a
further information.
bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices, 8. Seat Belt Reminder Light
such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster.
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
If the Charging System Light remains on, it means that
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
authorized dealer.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant 10. Engine Temperature Warning Light
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
Vehicle” for further information.
gauge approaches H , this indicator will illuminate
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperalight will come on and remain on when the
ture gauge to pass H , the indicator will continuously
ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON/RUN
flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine
position, and the light will turn off after the engine is
is allowed to cool.
started. If the bulb does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vethe vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine. service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
This can be determined using the procedure shown in Do In Emergencies” for further information.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces11. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, sary.
including brake fluid level and parking brake
WARNING!
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerthe brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
the anti-lock brake system.
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
dropped below a specified level.
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condithe ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
approximately three seconds. The light should then turn
the brake fluid level checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light PARK.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
14. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is The odometer display shows the total distance the veapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- hicle has been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require
that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify
tion.
to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer
reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If
12. Tachometer
The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a
good idea for you to make a record of the odometer
prevent engine damage.
reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure
13. Shift Lever Indicator
that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
4
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then
push and hold the button until the display resets (approximately two seconds). Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional information.
SPEEd TOO HIgH . . . . . . . . Vehicle Speed Is Too High
For Convertible Top Up/Down Operation
TOP donE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convertible Top Up/Down
Operation Is Complete
TOP nOT SECUrE . . . . Convertible Top Is Not Secured
LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
HOTOIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Temperature
Exceeds Safe Threshold
Vehicle Odometer Messages
gASCAP
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
When the appropriate conditions exist, the odometer will
CHANgE
OIL.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Oil Change Required
display the following messages:
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
dECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Ajar
TOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convertible Top Up/Down
TOP FAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convertible Top Up/Down
Operation Failed
SET CARgO SHIELd . . The Convertible Top Cargo Shield
Must Be Put In The Stowed Position
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
then all warnings including ”Low Tire,” “Door Ajar” and
“Trunk Ajar” will only display in the EVIC. (Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for specific messages).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Refer to “Convertible Top Operation” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for a table that explains
how long each message is displayed and the conditions
under which each message is displayed.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change
in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose,
improperly installed, or damaged, the words “gASCAP”
will display in the odometer display area. If this occurs,
LoW tirE
tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odomWhen the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
eter reset button to turn off the “gASCAP” message.
display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three
(Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in
cycles.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information). If
the problem continues, the message will appear the next
HOTOIL
When this message is displayed there is a engine oil time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer
over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs, service center as soon as possible.
the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odomCHANgE OIL
eter along with a chime.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
Emergencies”.
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
4. For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)”.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position. 15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed
Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset
Control System is ON.
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
16. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:
Trip Odometer
Press and release this button to change the display from
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
odometer to “Trip A.” Press and release it a second time
(do not start the engine).
to change the display to “Trip B.” Press and release it a
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times third time to change the display back to the odometer.
within 10 seconds.
To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
that you want to reset, “Trip A” or “Trip B.” Then push
and hold the button (approximately 2 seconds) until the
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
display resets to 0 miles (kilometers). The odometer must
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light
18. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This light informs you of a problem with the
This indicator will illuminate when the park
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
lights or headlights are turned on.
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. If the light remains
lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be 19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
drivable and not need towing, however see your autho- Light — If Equipped
rized dealer for service as soon as possible.
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control system (ESC) has been turned off by the
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you
driver.
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
20. Turn Signal Indicators
require towing. Immediate service is required.
The left or right arrow will flash with the correspondThe light will come on when the ignition switch is first
ing exterior turn signal lights when the turn signal
turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. This is lever is operated. A chime will sound if the vehicle is
normal. If the light does not come on during starting, driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
21. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
lights are on.
22. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
16 seconds when the alarm system is arming.
The light will begin to flash slowly indicating
that the system is armed. The light will stop
flashing when the vehicle is disarmed.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to
assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key
to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light
should come on. If the light does not come on, have the
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the ABS. This light will system inspected by an authorized dealer.
come on when the ignition key is turned to the
24. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
ON/RUN position and may stay on for apMalfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
proximately three seconds.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
when the ignition switch is turned to the
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In- • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
that caused the ESC activation.
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
should be checked monthly when cold and
problem diagnosed and corrected.
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
NOTE:
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo- has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
ON/RUN.
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that
monitors emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when
the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the key from
LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this 28. High Beam Indicator
light turns on while driving, safely pull over
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steerNEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
light turns off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Control Buttons
Display — If Equipped
This display shows the EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED
The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information
and temperature display.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperaMini-Trip Control Buttons
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings STEP Button
Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Functions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RESET Button
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, then press and hold the RESET button
located on the steering wheel.
The following displays can be reset or changed:
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
• Trip A
• Trip B
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instrument cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
The EVIC consists of the following:
• Compass Heading Display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE,
SW)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Mileage (Avg/MPG)
• Miles To Empty
• Low Tire Information (Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) Displays) — if equipped
4
• Timer
• Units
• System Warnings (Door Ajar, etc.)
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Outside Temperature Display (°F or °C)
• Audio Mode Displays – 12 preset Radio Stations or CD
Title and Track number when playing
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release the MENU button to advance
the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu
features. Upon reaching the last item in the
MENU Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first
Button item in the Main Menu with the next MENU
button press and release.
Press and release the SELECT Button to accept
a selection. The SELECT Button also resets
various Trip Functions.
SELECT
Button
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Press and release the DOWN button to advance Displays
the display through the various Trip Functions When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
or Personal Settings.
the following messages:
DOWN
Button
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime
after one mile traveled)
Press and release the COMPASS button to
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
display the compass heading, the outside
temperature, and Audio Info (when the ra- • Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
COMPASS dio is on) screen when the current screen is • Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
not the compass, outside temp, audio info
Button
chime)
screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single •
chime)
•
• RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a
•
single chime)
•
• Personal Settings Not Avail – Vehicle Not in Park
•
• Personal Settings Not Avail – Vehicle in Motion
•
• Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door
is open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in •
motion).
•
• Doors Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which doors
•
are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
•
motion).
Key In Ignition
Remote start aborted — Door ajar
Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
Remote start aborted — Trunk ajar
Remote start aborted — Fuel low
Remote start disabled — System fault
Convertible Top Not Secured (with a single chime)
Convertible Top Complete (with a single chime)
Secure Cargo Shield (with a single chime)
Speed Too High (with a single chime)
• Trunk Open (with vehicle graphic showing and open • Convertible Top Malfunction (with a single chime)
trunk and A single chime )
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
• Lights On
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Low Tire (with a graphic of the car showing which
tire(s) is/are low - with a single chime). Refer to ⬙Tire
Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙.
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
perform the following procedure:
• Check TPM System (with a single chime) Refer to ⬙Tire 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and start the engine.)
Operating⬙.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
Oil Change Required — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
EVIC Main Menu
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
To step to each main menu feature press and release the
your personal driving style.
MENU button once for each step. A step from the last
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list Compass Display
The compass heading indicates the directo be displayed. The following features are in the Main
tion the vehicle is facing. Press and release
menu:
the compass button to display one of eight
• Compass, Outside Temperature, Audio Information (if
COMPASS compass headings, the outside temperaradio is on) display
ture, and audio information (if the radio is
Button
• Average Fuel Economy
on) if the EVIC display is not already
displaying this screen.
• Distance to Empty
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
• Tire Pressure Status display
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
• Elapsed Time
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
• EVIC Units Selection
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
• System Status
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
• Personal Settings
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC will flash the “CAL” indicator until the compass is
calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing
one or more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Calibrate
Compass Yes” displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button and the “CAL”
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
indicator will start flashing.
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, 5. Drive the vehicle slowly (under 5 mph / 8 km/h),
completing one or more circles (in an area free from large
etc.
metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns
Manual Compass Calibration
off. The compass will now function normally.
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manu- Compass Variance
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
compass:
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as
cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
panel. This is where the compass module is located and
such devices may interfere and cause false compass
readings.
4
Compass Variance Map
To Change Compass Variance:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the
shift lever in PARK.
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Compass Distance To Empty (DTE)
Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in the
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
EVIC.
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
4. Press and release the SELECT button to increment the determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
Variance Value by one, (one button press per update), and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
until the proper variance zone is selected according to the tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
map.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and
holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC
display). Upon reset, the history information will be
erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel
average reading before the reset.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL”. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Tire PSI
Elapsed Time
Press and release the MENU button until ⬙Tire PSI⬙ is
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
displayed.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
Tire pressure information is displayed as follows:
in the RUN or START position.
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires, TIRE and a vehicle Elapsed time is displayed as follows:
graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each
hours:minutes:seconds
corner or the graphic.
Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the
• If one or more tires have low pressure, LOW TIRE and
SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon
a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure
reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start
values in each corner of the graphic. Tire pressure
incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or
values that are too low will be flashing.
START.
• If the Tire Pressure System requires service, ⬙Check
EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display)
TPM System⬙ is displayed. Tire PSI is an information
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature,
only function and cannot be reset.
Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty and Tire
Pressure features. Press and Release the SELECT button
to toggle units between ⬙U.S.⬙ and ⬙METRIC⬙.
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Status
Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning
Messages stored. Pressing and releasing the DOWN
button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing.
Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are
active Warning Messages stored. Pressing and releasing
the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT is displayed will display each stored warning for
each button press. Press and Release the MENU button to
return to the Main Menu.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK.
Press and release the DOWN button to display the
following programmable features:
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, or Dutch depending on availability. As you continue, the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the
driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press the
SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
Press and release the MENU button until “Personal RKE Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn with LOCK
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with
LOCK feature. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
without the Sound Horn with LOCK feature selected. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until ON or OFF appears.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
the SELECT button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears.
Headlamps With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
Flash Lamp with LOCK
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the selection, press the SELECT button until ON or OFF
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or appears.
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Key Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature.
To make your selection, press the SELECT button until
OFF, 45 sec, 5 min, or 10 min appears.
Display Units In
The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English
and Metric units of measure. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until “U.S.” or
“METRIC” appears.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock, located at the top center of the
Illumin. Approach
instrument panel, press and hold the button in until the
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate setting is correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are then quicker the longer the button is held.
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press the SELECT button until
“OFF,” “30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
4
Setting The Analog Clock
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Media Center 230 (REQ)
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
volume and to the left decreases it.
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command in the
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
set at the same volume level as last played.
details.
SEEK Buttons
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
screen.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not knob to save the time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
screen.
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
TIME Button
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
step 2.
and frequency display.
INFO Button
Clock Setting Procedure
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Program Type
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
16-Digit Character
Display
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Top 40
Weather
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
up and down the menu (if equipped).
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
mode.
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
will display the following:
SETUP Button
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
the following items:
available on the disc (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will • VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
the disc) (if equipped).
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change • Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
equipped).
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
NOTE:
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
• The available selections for each of the above entries
changes.
varies depending upon the disc.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
• These selections can only be made while playing a
user to scroll through the following items and set
DVD.
defaults according to customer preference.
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
Menu Language — If Equipped
OFF (if equipped).
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
equipped).
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/ Subtitles — If Equipped
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the • Maximum number of files: 255
following restrictions.
• Maximum number of folders: 100
Supported Media (Disc Types)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeradio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
character extension)
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
MPEG
Specification
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
24, 22.05, 16
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
48, 64, 96, 128,
44.1 and 48
160, 192 VBR
WMA
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
Specification
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
WMA
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
affected by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
No function.
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilelapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
display for five seconds.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
No function.
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
down.
No function.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
DTS™
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital TheOperating Instructions - Video Entertainment
ater Systems, Inc.
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES)™” for fur- Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
ther details.
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastDolby威
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
Dolby威 Laboratories.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
calling:
limited coverage in Alaska.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
System Activation
Number (ESN/SID).
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio 2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including ESN/SID Access
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posiinformation, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
form of short audio mutes.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
cause signal blockage.
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as (Satellite) Mode
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
ACC position to operate the radio.
on or above the antenna.
SEEK Buttons
Reception Quality
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
following reasons:
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
structure or under a physical obstacle.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
INFO Button
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- seconds will allow the program format type to be seable). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an lected.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
type.
to normal display).
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
RW/FF
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
following items:
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
Sirius subscription.
twice.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Buttons 1 - 6
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
and press and release that button. If a button is not commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
stored into pushbutton memory.
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
4
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
Media Center 130 (RES)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
side of the radio faceplate.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
TIME Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second and radio frequency.
time to turn off the radio.
Clock Setting Procedure
Electronic Volume Control
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the SCROLL control knob.
volume, and to the left decreases it.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
set at the same volume level as last played.
will begin to blink.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit
to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
(Continued)
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
TIME Button
Play.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
RW/FF
file recording media and formats are limited. When
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricplayer will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
tions.
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
Supported Media (Disc Types)
button works in a similar manner.
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
AM/FM Button
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
display.)
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
by the following:
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
CD-R media
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer vehicle speakers.
to load than non-multisession discs
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
increase with more files and folders
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
before writing to the disc.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea- available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
tures Of Your Vehicle”.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
TIME Button
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under- and radio frequency.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Clock Setting Procedure
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
screen.
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
will begin to blink.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
knob to save time change.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
procedure, starting at Step 2.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the format types:
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
16-Digit Character
Program Type
Display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
No
program
type
or
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
None
undefined
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
the front and rear speakers.
Classical
Classicl
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
16-Digit Character
Display
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Program Type
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
the following items:
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
be stored into pushbutton memory.
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
to save time change.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
AM/FM Button
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
button number will display.
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons 1 - 6
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
stations).
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
MP3 Audio Play
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on works in a similar manner.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file norPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ranmally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With Supported MP3 File Formats
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
display.)
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- not play the file.
character extension)
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
VBR bit rates.
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
MPEG
Sampling
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
Bit Rate (kbps)
Specification Frequency (kHz)
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
320, 256, 224,
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
MPEG-1 Audio
192, 160, 128,
longer disc loading times.
48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
supported by the radios.
increase with more files and folders
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
supported.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
Playback of MP3 Files
before writing to the disc.
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
time to start playing the MP3 files.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
playable files).
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilthe following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
time⬙ priority mode.
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
more and the radio will display song titles for each file. down.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number Reception Quality
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
structure or under a physical obstacle.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
mode.
form of short audio mutes.
Satellite Antenna
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
cause intermittent reception.
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
(Satellite) Mode
on or above the antenna.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
INFO Button
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informaor turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availseconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butchannel with the same selected Music Type name.
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
stored into pushbutton memory.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
SETUP Button
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
following items:
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the twice.
Sirius subscription.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
Buttons 1 - 6
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
iPod威 or external USB device support capability.
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate • Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
feature to control the connected device.
an option with these radios.
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
plugged into the USB port, located in the center of the Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
instrument panel below the climate controls.
located in the center of the instrument panel below the
climate controls.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
USB Connector Port
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), • The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
pressing radio switches, as described below.
audio device)
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
Play Mode
When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
USB device and display data:
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
previous track.
seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the • Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 deprevious or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
each track in the current list and then forward to the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
Track⬙.
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previthe associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
ous and next tracks.
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the ⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
Uconnect™ phone system.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
Next Track
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
Streaming Audio”.
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
Play Mode
music on your cellular phone.
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
Previous Track
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
previous track music on your cellular phone.
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
and played.
current song that is playing will display info.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different,
depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
function in this mode.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
Manual Temperature Control
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control
to the right from the “O” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from sevclimate controls will not function during Remote Start
eral patterns of air distribution. You
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
can select either a primary mode as
position.
identified by the symbols on the conTemperature Control
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
Rotate this control to regulate the temThe closer the setting is to a particular
perature of the air inside the passenger
symbol, the more air distribution you
compartment. Rotating the dial left
receive from that mode.
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Panel
Floor
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat Mix
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
Bi-Level
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiThis feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
mum
blower and temperature settings for best windcool conditions.
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu- • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will • The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
temporarily put the system in recirculation
control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
mode. This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
• Recirculated air is not allowed in Floor, Mix or Defrost
humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause
modes. If the Recirculation button is depressed while
the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten
in any of these modes, the LED indicator will flash
minutes, the system will return to normal mode function
several times then go out. Recirculation will be disand the LED will turn off.
abled automatically is these modes are selected.
NOTE:
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
ing the mode control selection.
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Air Conditioning Control
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Press this button to engage the Air Equipped
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
• MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
• ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation of the system is quite simple.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
NOTE:
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
without affecting automatic operation.
occupants only.
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
2. Dial in the temperature you would
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
like the system to maintain by rotating
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
the Temperature Control knob. Once the
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
comfort level is selected, the system will
air conditioning is not necessary.
maintain that level automatically using
the heating system. Should the desired • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
comfort level require air conditioning,
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
the system will automatically make the adjustment.
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
reducing air conditioning performance.
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
• While operating in AUTO, the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the
windshield. The defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
Blower Control
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
For full automatic operation or for
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
automatic blower operation, turn the
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
mode there are seven blower speeds
that can be individual selected. In off NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
position the blower will shut off.
Operation Chart that follows for details.
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument • Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Bi-Level
• Defrost
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there mum blower and temperature settings for best windis a difference in temperature between the upper and shield and side window defrosting.
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to turn OFF the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause
the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten
minutes, the system will return to normal AUTO mode
function and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
• Recirculation Control
mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or Mix mode
The system will automatically control recircuin order to improve window clearing. Recirculation
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
will be disabled automatically if these modes are
Control button will temporarily put the system
selected.
in recirculation mode. This can be used when
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
Mix mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in
these modes will cause the LED in the control button
to blink and then turn off.
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Mix and then press the
Recirculation button. This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging.
Operating Tips
• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
suggested control settings for various weather condiMode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
tions.
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Mix
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and
Winter Operation
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging beUse of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months comes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle winis not recommended because it may cause window dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid
fogging.
weather.
Vacation Storage
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service long periods as fogging may occur.
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service
intervals.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . 304
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE) . . . 304
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 301
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
䡵 AutoStick威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 334
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 342
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 359
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 348 䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.6L Engine Only) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 349
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . .
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
. . . . . . . . . 362
. . . . . . . . . 362
. . . . . . . . . 363
. . . . . . . . . 363
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 364
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Loose Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 369
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Recreational Towing – All Models . . . . . . . . 381
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
Make sure all occupants have securely fastened their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
Normal Starting
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine does not require pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Tip Start
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition key briefly
to START position, and release it. The starter motor will
continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warning effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your foot is firmly
pressing on the brake pedal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
children unattended inside a vehicle.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
Systems
These systems prevent the key fob from being removed
unless the shift lever is in PARK. They also prevent
shifting out of PARK unless the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position and the brake pedal is applied.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position
and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK
position unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift
lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must
be turned to the ON/RUN or START position (engine
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE)
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
the PARK position (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick威 shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick威 shift control
(refer to “AutoStick威” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information). Moving the shift lever to the left or
right (-/+) while in the AutoStick威 position (below the
Drive position) will manually select the transmission
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
Shift Lever
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
Gear Ranges
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauDO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing
the brake pedal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never
leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
(Continued)
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with engine running. The engine may be started
in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive
sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威 mode
(refer to “AutoStick威” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
level.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for 5. Restart the engine.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
operation.
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper- NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illu- mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
minated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagdriven to an authorized dealer for service without dam- nostic equipment to determine if the problem could
aging the transmission.
recur.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the service is required.
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Override Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the following conditions are present:
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
•
•
•
•
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem[usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
perature,
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
the engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera- converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.
ture,
This is normal. Using the AutoStick威 feature, when the
vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that
the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
AUTOSTICK姞
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive feature providing
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. manual shift control, giving you more control of the
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
AutoStick威 is deactivated when the shift lever is moved
from the AutoStick (+/-) position into the DRIVE
position.
General Information
• You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except sixth.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick威 position (below
the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side. • If a ratio other than first gear is selected, and the
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
vehicle is brought to a stop, the transmission control
gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-)
logic will automatically select the first gear ratio.
triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The
• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the
conditions. To select second gear after the vehicle is
transmission range indicator.
brought to a stop, tap the shift lever to the right (+)
once.
NOTE: In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is enthe right (+) or left (-), or as described below.
gaged.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
• The transmission will automatically shift up when DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick威 is
Acceleration
engaged.
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
AutoStick威 is engaged.
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
• If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed,
the front (driving) wheels.
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
• If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick威 mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Parking Brake
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
PARKING BRAKE
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
transmission in PARK.
completely.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
(Continued) system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake
short time after the stop),
(ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS • the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
system is required. See your authorized dealer.
• brake pedal pulsations,
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related
end of the stop.
motor noises. These noises are the system performing its
self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is
started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions
and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and Traction Control System (TCS)
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
accurate signals for the computer.
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad- stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
vanced electronic brake control system that includes a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
(TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), and Electronic Stability spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
reduction. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle
ESC Operating Modes
All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more
wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to
operating modes:
gain traction.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
Partial ESC Mode
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank below the
heater/air conditioning controls). When in “Partial Off”
mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC
function normally, with the exception of engine power
ESC Off Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
operation.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
WARNING!
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
In partial ESC mode, the engine power reduction
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
feature of ESC is disabled. Therefore, enhanced
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is remalfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
duced.
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authowith snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
diagnosed and corrected.
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lomode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
the vehicle is in motion.
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac- TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
Tire Markings
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa•
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period.
Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing
the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes
and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
on your vehicle’s placard.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasTo determine the maximum loading conditions of your sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
• For the following example, the combined weight of
calculated in Step 4.
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear Information” section of this manual.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
consumption.
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial-Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxiSpare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
Wheel – If Equipped
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
75 mph (120 km/h).
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
pattern.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipthe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempodriver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
80D18 103M.
with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equiptire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or icy conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
5
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proSNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the checked before using these tire types.
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only different loads and perform different steering, driving,
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
safety and handling of your vehicle.
unequal rates.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low temperature
effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The
system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.”
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
the tire.
message will be displayed for a minimum of five
Base System
seconds and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
in one or more of the four active road tires. Should this
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
readings to the Receiver Module.
pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the pressures, the system will automatically update and the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and ⬙LOW
and to maintain the proper pressure.
TIRE⬙ message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
The TPMS consists of the following components:
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
• Receiver Module
Check TPMS Warning
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sensors.
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn ON and a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will be dis2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
played for a minimum of five seconds.
that affects radio wave signals.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
housings.
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
readings to the Receiver Module.
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
and to maintain the proper pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSa graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with TEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
the low tire pressure values flashing.
indicate which sensor is not being received.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate all tires with low pressure (those flashing in If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash- SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
ing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to can occur due to any of the following:
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
TPMS to receive this information.
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on that affects radio wave signals.
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “Tire Pressure
The EVIC will also display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime will
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is value in the graphic display.
detected. In this case, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ mes3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
sage is then followed with a graphic display with pres15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
sure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
values are still being received from the TPM sensors but
remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
The system still needs to be serviced as long as the
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
pressure value.
NOTE:
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
and the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ • This device must accept any interference received,
message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
including interference that may cause undesired
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
operation.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure
value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S18002015B
Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267T-S180015B
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoGeneral Information
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
following conditions:
these engines.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold driveability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Problems that result from using gasoline containing E-85 perform the following:
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
• change the engine oil and oil filter
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
• disconnect and reconnect the battery
not be covered under warranty.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containMore extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
exposure to E-85 fuel.
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
E-85 Fuel Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
avoided.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
15% unleaded gasoline.
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C),
you may experience hard starting and rough idle
following start up even if the above recommendations
are followed.
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu- beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperalated engine oils. These special requirements are included ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer requires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Cruising Range
CAUTION!
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon compatible components can damage your vehicle.
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear
quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Tether Cable
WARNING!
NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
(Continued)
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Filler Cap Message
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
in violation of most state and federal fire regula- “gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument
tions and doing so may cause the MIL to turn on. cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the message. If the problem persists, the message will
the ground while filling.
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
NOTE:
in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. problem will turn the MIL off.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn VEHICLE LOADING
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
Vehicle Certification Label
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
refueled.
of the driver’s door.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
The label contains the following information:
tank is full.
WARNING! (Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle TRAILER TOWING
separately. It is important that you distribute the load In this section, you will find safety tips and information
evenly over the front and rear axles.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension review this information to tow your load as efficiently
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s and safely as possible.
GVWR.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning veLoading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty hicles used for trailer towing.
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as this section, please consult your dealer to for full details
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before on the towing capabilities of the vehicle.
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Common Towing Definitions
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
you in understanding the following information:
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear
GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than or more than 10% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings
Max. GTW
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
Engine/Transmission
Max. Frontal Area
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
(See Note 1)
2.4L/Auto
See Note 2
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
3.6L/Auto
22 sq.ft. (2.0 sq.m)
2,000 lbs (900 kg)
200 lbs (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Note 1: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer
to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Note 2: Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields/guards are not recommended for use with
all four-cylinder engines with automatic transmission. Please see your authorized dealer for additional information.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended
frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or
cause severe engine damage under extreme conditions.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause
the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause Consider the following items when computing the
loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer • The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
collisions.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
put in or on your vehicle.
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and
Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Incorrect trailer tongue weight could result in increased yaw or vehicle instability. A negative trailer
tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of
the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability. Negative
trailer tongue weight could cause the trailer to squat
and potentially become disengaged from the tow
vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
(Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
WARNING! (Continued)
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve 10% of trailer tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on tread wear indicators and for proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement
Towing Requirements – Tires
procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carry• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
ing capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and
spare tire.
GAWR limits.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper- • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation prespersonal injury.
sures before trailer usage.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes with adequate
braking capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in a collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working NOTE: The six-speed transmission does not require a
fluid level check before towing. If, however, you notice
properly — including hazard flashers.
fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see your auAutomatic Transmission
thorized dealership service center for assistance.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs, select a lower gear using Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
the AutoStick威 shift control.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
under heavy operating conditions, will improve perfordrops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
mance and extend transmission life by reducing excesyou can get back to cruising speed.
sive shifting and heat build-up. This action will also
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
provide better engine braking.
maximize fuel efficiency.
If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
• Highway Driving
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Reduce speed.
heating, take the following actions:
• Air Conditioning
• City Driving
Turn off temporarily.
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF the
Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
All Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Recreational Towing – All Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Engine Only
䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . .
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . .
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . .
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . .
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
6
384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Automatic Transmission (4-Speed, And
6-Speed 62TE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
6
386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Engine Only (If
Equipped)
During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up
long grades on hot day, the engine oil temperature may
become too hot. If this happens, the “HOTOIL” message
flashes, the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph
(85 km/h) until the engine oil temperature is reduced.
NOTE: Engine speed is reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) at
the maximum. You may of course, reduce your speed
further if needed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the trunk.
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the trunk.
6
388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
(Continued)
6
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of
Tires--General Information--for information about the
spare tire, its use, and operation.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
Jack Warning Label
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in Step 3.
3. There is a front and rear jacking location on each side
of the vehicle.
6
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Front Jacking Location
392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
Rear Jacking Location
6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
covers (where applicable) off the hub. Install the spare
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
• To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in personal injury.
• To avoid possible personal injury, handle the
wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any
sharp edges.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
Mounting Spare Tire
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while at the end of the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have tightened
the nuts correctly, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
6
394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is Road Tire Installation
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area and have
the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
the tire pressure as required.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
handle counterclockwise.
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
nuts.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Locking Tab
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
6
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the dis4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
charged battery.
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi- front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure
to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
wheels, is most effective.
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), turn the system to Partial OFF
before attempting to “rock” the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
6
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the cupholder liner.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position without 6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
starting the engine.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
8. Reinstall the cupholder liner.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the hole at the
front of the cupholder and push and hold the override
lever forward.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the Ground
Flat Tow
NONE
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Rear
Front
ALL
4-SPEED, 6-SPEED (62TE)
TRANSMISSIONS
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h)max speed
• 15 mi (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent equipment designed for the purpose, following equipdamage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
6
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position, not
the LOCK or ACC positions.
Automatic Transmission (4-Speed, and 6-Speed
62TE)
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following condi(Continued) tions:
• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 mi (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
mi (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels OFF
the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flatbed towing is
the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed
towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on
the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will
occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front
wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 411
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
7
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Cleaning Center Console Cupholders . . . . . . 443
▫ Convertible Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ Weather Strip Care – Soft And Hard Top . . . . 445
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 457
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
— Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “GASCAP” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap
until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that
the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
“Reset” button to turn off the message. If the problem
7
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- crank or start the engine.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
WARNING!
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one
Engine Oil
quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the
Checking Oil Level
range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must the range marking.
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
7
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
Change Engine Oil
been certified by the American
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
Petroleum Institute (API). The
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
manufacturer only recommends
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
API Certified engine oils.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating
temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.4L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certistarting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade numcap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for ber should not be used.
your vehicle.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartengine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informament” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- tion.
tion.
7
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi- indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
ber should not be used.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
Synthetic Engine Oils
your area.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- Engine Oil Filter
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are high quality and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind
the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to
_Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the inner fender shield.
maintenance intervals.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
7
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres(Continued) sor Oil, and Refrigerants.
7
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the
maintenance intervals.
dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and the
end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box) with
WARNING!
your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while
lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand.
Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is
Once disconnected, the dampener will retract underoperating or personal injury may result.
neath the instrument panel if you release it.
The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind 4. Pivot the glove box downward.
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re5. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
place the filter:
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the
door.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
CAUTION!
The A/C Air Filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to install the filter properly will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
6. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
7
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Make sure that they are not frozen to the
glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the
blade.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum
products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located
in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance in(Continued) tervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to
five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant
(antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
7
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
the vehicle is operated.
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Coolant Level
Four-Cylinder Engines – the coolant bottle provides a
quick visual method for determining that the engine
coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine
idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown
on the bottle.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
Six-Cylinder Engines – the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the pressurized coolant bottle should be
between the “COLD” and “FULL” range on the bottle
when the engine is cold.
7
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
from the front of the engine compartment. This is norsystem should be pressure tested for leaks.
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
mileage, and increased emissions.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system failBrake System
ure.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper forming underhood services.
maintenance intervals.
7
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.
7
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is
important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the
prescribed level using the recommended fluid.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will require
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer
serviced only.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using a special service dipstick. Should you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, have your authorized dealer check
the transmission fluid level.
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
Transmission Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
is disassembled for any reason.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- • Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
• Stone and gravel impact.
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly • Insects, tree sap, and tar.
7
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 Special Care
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
scratch the paint.
a month.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
and open.
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
considered the responsibility of the owner.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
the owner.
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
7
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
with a clean, dry towel.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove clean vinyl upholstery.
soap residue.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
7
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may
scratch the elements.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
directly on the mirror.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the Convertible Top Care
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning Center Console Cupholders
Removal
Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift
upward.
Cleaning
Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium
hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips.
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry
the surface before opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicles interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicles interior.
7
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
top and storage compartment.
General Cleaning
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in
partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle
before washing the top. The top should be washed with
a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap
Washing
solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use
Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car
detergent.
washing equipment can damage the top material. If you
must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are
CAUTION!
preferred.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
CAUTION!
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic solvents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always
Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage
wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
it into the storage area.
force water past the weather strips.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the
entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from
the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and
chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering.
Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will
decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt,
and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings
may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains
persist, contact your local dealership for further
suggestions.
apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the stain
is no longer showing, rinse the complete top with warm
water. Let the top dry before lowering it.
Protection
For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect your
cloth top periodically. A fabric protectant such as Scotchguard威 is suggested. The top should be clean and dry
before application of the protectant.
CAUTION!
Avoid getting Scotchguard威 on the surrounding
Additional Cleaning Procedure
weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to
For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn
these items might occur.
stains, apply MOPAR威 Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
equivalent to the complete stain, extending 2 inches
Weather Strip Care – Soft And Hard Top
(50 mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub
Lubricate all top and door glass weather strips periodiin all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy scrubbing.
cally with MOPAR威 Weather Strip Lubricant or equivaRinse the area with warm water. If the stain is still
lent to keep them soft and pliable.
7
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the
cover. Refer to the graphic below for FUSES/TIPM location.
Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Integrated Power Module
Cartridge
Mini Fuse
Description
Fuse
40 Amp
Power Top Module
—
Green
– If Equipped
20 Amp
—
AWD Module
Yellow
Center High
10 Amp Mounted Stop
—
Red
Light (CHMSL)/
Brake Switch
10 Amp
—
Ignition Switch
Red
20 Amp Trailer Tow –
—
Yellow If Equipped
Power Mirror
10 Amp
—
Switch/Climate
Red
Controls
30 Amp Ignition Off Draw
—
Green
(IOD) Sense 1
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Cavity
8
9
10
11
12
13
Cartridge
Mini Fuse
Description
Fuse
30 Amp Ignition Off Draw
—
Green
(IOD) Sense 2
Battery Feed –
Power Seats – If
40 Amp
Equipped/PZEV
Green
Air Pump – If
Equipped
Instrument Panel/
20 Amp
—
Power Locks/
Yellow
Interior Lights
Selectable Power
15 Amp
—
Outlet (Inside
Lt Blue
Center Arm Rest)
20 Amp
—
—
Yellow
20 Amp
—
Ignition
Yellow
Cavity
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Cartridge
Mini Fuse
Description
Fuse
10 Amp
—
Instrument Panel
Red
40 Amp
—
Radiator Fan Relay
Green
Cigar Lighter/
15 Amp
—
Sunroof – If
Lt. Blue
Equipped
Wireless Control
10 Amp Module (WCM)/
—
Clock/Steering ConRed
trol Module (SCM)
40 Amp
Auto Shutdown
—
Green
(ASD) Relay
20 Amp Audio Amplifier –
—
Yellow If Equipped
15 Amp
—
Radio
Lt. Blue
7
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
21
22
23
24
25
26
Cartridge
Mini Fuse
Description
Fuse
10 Amp
—
Siren – If Equipped
Red
Ignition Run –
10 Amp Climate Controls/
—
Red
Hot Cupholder –
If Equipped
15 Amp Auto Shutdown
—
Lt. Blue (ASD) Relay 3
25 Amp Sunroof – If
—
Natural Equipped
Ignition Run —
10 Amp
—
Heated Mirrors Red
If Equipped
15 Amp Auto Shutdown
—
Lt. Blue (ASD) Relay 2
Cavity
Cartridge
Mini Fuse
Fuse
27
—
10 Amp
Red
28
—
10 Amp
Red
29
—
—
30
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Ignition Run –
Occupant
Classification
Module (OCM)/
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
Ignition Run —
Occupant
Classification
Module (OCM)/
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
Hot Car (No Fuse
Required)
Ignition Run –
Heated Seats –
If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
Cavity
31
32
33
34
Cartridge
Mini Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
—
Spare
30 Amp
Auto Shutdown
—
Pink
(ASD) Relay 1
Switch Bank/
Diagnostic Link
10 Amp
—
Connector/
Red
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module –
If Equipped/
30 Amp
—
Electronic Stability
Pink
Control (ESC)
Module –
If Equipped
Cavity
Cartridge
Mini Fuse
Fuse
35
40 Amp
Green
—
36
30 Amp
Pink
—
37
—
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module –
If Equipped/
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
Module –
If Equipped
Passenger Door
Module (PDM)/
Driver Door
Module (DDM)
Power Top Module
– If Equipped
7
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Front Park Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
be used for replacement.
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear
Tail/Stop/Turn
Lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb No.
(Serviced
at Authorized Dealer)
Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 578/W5W
Backup
Lamp
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp. . . . . . . . . . 578/W5W
License
Lamp.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . W5W
Visor Vanity Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220 BULB REPLACEMENT
Shift Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IKLE14140
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Headlamp
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer 1. Raise and prop open the hood. Locate the connector
for replacement.
behind the headlamp.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Bulb No. filter housing and position the totally integrated power
Bi-Halogen Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIR2 module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlamp
Front Turn Signal Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157NAK on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
7
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach into engine compartment and from behind the
lamp assembly and grasp the connector.
CAUTION!
3. Rotate bulb and connector one-quarter turn and pull
outward from assembly.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.
Front Turn Signal
1. Raise and prop open the hood.
2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp
housing.
3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
5. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Access to the lamps through the lower fascia
cutout is limited. We recommend you access the lamps by
6. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate
turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove
clockwise one-quarter turn to secure.
the inner fender shield.
7
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn Backup Lamps
counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp hous1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner
ing.
behind the tail lamp (requires removal of a push pin
2. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install holding the trunk trim in place near the tail lamp).
the replacement bulb.
2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp
housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
NOTE: Placing a small flat head screwdriver or similar
tool between the lamp outboard ball stud and plastic
grommet from inside the trunk can help to disengage the
outboard edge of the tail lamp.
3. Grasp the tail lamp by both the outboard and inboard
sides, and pull firmly to disengage the tail lamp from the
vehicle.
NOTE: It is normal to hear a loud sound when the lower
tail lamp area unsnaps from the vehicle mounting
bracket during tail lamp removal.
4. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
5. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
6. Reinstall the tail lamp, fasteners, and trunk liner.
7
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
License Plate Lamp
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on
the lamp assembly for removal.
FLUID CAPACITIES
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp
assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines — (Except 2.4L PZEV)
16.9 Gallons
2.4L PZEV (Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle)
18.5 Gallons
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.5 Quarts
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)
6 Quarts
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant
7.7 Quarts
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant
11.6 Quarts
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
64 Liters
70 Liters
4.4 Liters
5.6 Liters
7.3 Liters
11 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT
Engine Coolant
(Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting Chrysler Material
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil Filter
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine except PZEV* ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Spark Plugs – 2.4L with PZEV*
ZFR5AP (Gap 0.031 in [0.8 mm])
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection
87 Octane
* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
7
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 462 E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change Depending on operating conditions, the message may
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will appear as early as 3,500 miles (5 630 km) since last reset.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within
scheduled maintenance.
the next 500 miles (805 km).
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S On
8
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) NOTE:
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis- • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 461 M
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, At Each Stop For Fuel
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
illuminated.
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or six months, which- • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
ever comes first.
required.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
Once A Month
E
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or D
U
damage.
L
E
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals S
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
as required.
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odommaster cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
operation.
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463 M
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465 M
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467 M
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever
comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 468 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
96,000 miles (156 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV Valve if necessary.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 469 M
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L PZEV
Engine Only).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 470 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or
N
T 90 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter(s).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 471 M
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 472 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or 114 Months
N Maintenance Service Schedule
T
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before 152,000 miles (247 000 km).
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 475
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 476
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 476
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
9
474 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 475
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
476 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Phone: (800) 247–9753
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
P.O. Box 1621
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
center.
In Mexico contact:
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are acTo contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– for an order form.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from • Service Manuals
http://www.safercar.gov.
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
In Canada
information that students and professional technicians
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
should contact the Customer Service Department immedimaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
to the Canadian government should contact Transport
9
480 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the The following tire grading categories were established by
assistance of service and engineering specialists to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
• Owner’s Manuals
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 481
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
your vehicle.
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforAll passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
mance.
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
Traction Grades
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
9
482 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
484 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Accessory Delay, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 429
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 419
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293,422
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420,421
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,285,420
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,66,81,200
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,60,62
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,208
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244,269
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429,456
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
INDEX 485
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 205,218
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 285
Automatic Transaxle
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,435
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Transmitter Replacement
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.....
.....
(RKE)
.....
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,81
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,458
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 79
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,451
. . . . . 334
. . . . . 419 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
. . . . . 25 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
. . . . . 419
10
486 INDEX
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,417
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,361
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111,281
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,69,70,74,75
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,74
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,229,248,257
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213,219
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 272
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
INDEX 487
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 430
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428,431
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . 429,456,457
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,443
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,283,289
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
10
488 INDEX
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 412
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Through Flowing, Rising, or
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428,457
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 169
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,361
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357,456
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 214
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,456,457
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,218,416
Emergency, In Case of
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,417
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
INDEX 489
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293,422
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,457
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,162,454
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,363
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199,366 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416,456
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 63
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,361
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,425
Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
10
490 INDEX
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,458
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,458
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 457
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,161,208,453
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199,366
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357,457
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357,456
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 366,368,411
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
INDEX 491
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,451
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 163
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,26,141,357
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159,167
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,371
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,371
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Hazard
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 163
10
492 INDEX
Hitches
Trailer Towing .
Holder, Cup . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage
Hood Prop . . . . . .
Hood Release . . . .
...................
...................
Door Opener) Transmitter
...................
...................
...
...
..
...
...
372
184
172
157
156
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,199
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,163
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387,389
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
16
16
15
20
12
55
INDEX 493
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . 162,207,454
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,74
Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,451
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,158
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,66,81,200
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . 158,163
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 327
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,208,453
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . 159,167
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
10
494 INDEX
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 211
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . 209,349
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,158,162,207,453,454
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 199
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,370
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,74
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,412
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
INDEX 495
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,60,63
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,60
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,206
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,218
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,218
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,457
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,218,416
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,457
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213,218
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,478
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
10
496 INDEX
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416,456 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 334
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Power
Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,456
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411,412
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 181
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,317
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,479
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) . . . . 152
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Programming Transmitters
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
INDEX 497
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 430
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Remote Control
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 279
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 205,218
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
10
498 INDEX
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244,269
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,42,81
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68,70,75
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,43
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 429,457
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,229,248,257
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
INDEX 499
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 293
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,162,454
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,343,387
Specifications
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 169,206
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,299
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Steering
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,317
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,450
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 55
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 285
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 199,386
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
10
500 INDEX
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 334
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,338,480
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,335
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 349
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,338
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
INDEX 501
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Transaxle
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,435
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,38
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,162,207,454
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
272
111
197
480
10
502 INDEX
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 272
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335,368,370
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,450
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,167,425
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,283,289
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,167
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
INDEX 503
Windstop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
12C27-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.